OWNER'S MANUAL

LED TV

Owner's Record

24P2305 Series You will find the model number and serial number on
the back of the TV. Record these numbers in the spaces

32P2305 Series
provided below. Refer to them whenever you call upon
your TOSHIBA dealer regarding this product.

39P2305 Series
Model number:
Serial number:

©2013 TOSHIBA CORPORATION

All Rights Reserved TD/TE VX1A00279600

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 1 2013/05/23 8:28:42

 Pedestal stand Assembling
CAUTION: Before beginning pedestal assembly, carefully lay the front of the LCD Panel face down on a flat,
cushioned surface such as a quilt or blanket. Leave the bottom of the unit protruding over the edge of the
surface and assemble as indicated.
Note:
Extreme care should always be used when attaching the pedestal stand to avoid damage to the LCD panel.

1 3

2 4
32P2305 Series/39 P2305 Series models
M5 × 2

M4 × 4

24P2305 Series models

Warning: Ensure the power cable is not pinched
when attaching the pedestal stand as this could
cause an electric shock.
M4 × 2

–2–

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 2 2013/05/23 8:28:42

 Welcome to Toshiba
• Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba LED TV. This
manual will help you use the exciting features of
your new TV.
• Instructions in this manual are based on using the
remote control.
• You also can use the controls on the TV if they
have the same name as those referred to on the
remote control.
• Please read all safety and operating instructions
in this manual carefully, and keep this manual for
future reference.
• “LED TV” means LCD Panel with LED Backlight.
Contents
Pedestal stand Assembling ............................. 2
Welcome to Toshiba........................................... 3
Important Safety Instructions ........................ 3
Connecting an aerial ......................................... 6
Exploring your new TV ...................................... 6
TV panel controls ................................................ 6
Learning about the remote control ............. 7
TV back panel connections ............................. 7
Connecting HDMI or DVI devices.................. 8
Connecting a computer ................................... 8
Turning the TV on ............................................... 9
Tuning the TV for the first time ...................... 9
Using the Quick Menu ....................................11
Learning about the menu system...............11
Watching TV programmes .............................12
Selecting the video external source
to view ..............................................................12
Channel List ........................................................13
Selecting the PC/HDMI 1 Audio mode......13
Setting the HDMI 1 Audio mode .................13
Picture adjustment ...........................................13
Sound adjustment ............................................15
Other features settings ...................................16
Teletext .................................................................17
Using the PC Settings ......................................19
Using the Media Player ...................................19
Media Player Supported Formats ...............24
Troubleshooting................................................27
Broadcast system ..............................................28
Specifications .....................................................29
–3–
243239P2305Series_EN.indd 3
Important Safety Instructions
Be sure to observe the following instructions and
precautions to ensure safe use of this TV.
Installation
1) WARNING: To prevent injury, this apparatus
must be securely attached to the floor/wall in
accordance with the installation instructions.
Install the TV in a horizontal, stable location.
Attach the TV to the stand with the mounting
screw.
• If the TV is not installed securely, it may lean or
fall over and cause an injury.
• To prevent injury, use the exclusive optional
stand or wall-hanging bracket to install this
TV on the floor or wall securely in accordance
with a qualified technician.
Screw hole
Top view
2) Never place the TV in an unstabilized location
such as on a shaky table, incline or location
subject to vibration.
• Only use cabinets or stands recommended by
the TV manufacturer.
• Only use furniture that can safely support the
TV.
• Ensure that the TV is not hanging over the
edge of the supporting furniture.
• Never place the TV on tall furniture (for
example, cupboards or bookcases) without
anchoring both the furniture and the TV to a
suitable support.
• Never stand the TV on cloth or other material
placed between the TV and supporting
furniture.
The TV may drop or fall off, which may cause an
injury or damage.
3) Never stand or climb on the TV.
• Educate children about the dangers of
climbing on furniture to reach the TV or its
controls.
Be especially careful in households with children
to prevent them through climbing on top of
the TV. It may move, fall over, break, become
damaged or cause an injury.
4) Always connect the power plug to an
appropriate electrical outlet equipped with
110-240 V, AC 50/60 Hz.
Never use the TV outside the specified voltage
range. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
About the fuse (only for E models)
In a three pin earthing-type, the fuse fitted in
this plug is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
It should only be replaced by a correctly rated
2013/05/23 8:28:42
 and approved type and the fuse cover must be
refitted.
About the use
• Make sure to insert the plugs firmly, when
plugging the AC power cord into the TV set
end and wall outlet end.
• Make sure to hold the plug, when unplugging
the AC power cord.
• Never use other cord except for supplied AC
power cord, and never use the supplied power
cord for any other purpose.
5) Never insert or remove the power plug with
wet hands.
This may cause an electric shock.
6) Never block or cover the slots and openings in
the cabinet.
• Never place the TV so that it is facing upward
or on its side.
• Never place the TV in a closet, bookcase or
other similar area where the ventilation is
poor.
• Never drape a newspaper, tablecloth or
curtain on the TV.
• When installing the TV against a wall, always
keep the TV at least 10 cm away from the wall.
• Never place the TV on a soft unstable surface,
such as a carpet, or a cushion.
The inside of this TV will overheat if the
ventilation holes are covered, blocked or sealed,
which may result in a fire.
7) Never place the TV near a heater or in direct
sunlight.
The surface of the cabinet or power cord may
melt and result in a fire or an electric shock.
8) Never place the TV in an area exposed to high
humidity levels, such as in a bathroom or
close to a humidifier.
This may cause a fire or an electric shock.
9) Never place the TV next to a stove where it
will be exposed to oil, smoke, or steam, or in
a location where there is a large quantity of
dust.
This may cause a fire or an electric shock.
10) Precautions for moving the TV
• When moving the TV, be sure to remove the
plug from the wall outlet and disconnect
the aerial cable and audio/video cables, any
steady ties and mounting screw. A fire or an
electric shock may result if the power cord is
damaged.
• When carrying the TV, at least two people are
needed. Be sure to carry it upright.
• Never carry the TV with the screen facing up
or down.
11) Precautions for installing on outdoor aerial
An outside aerial system should not be located
in the vicinity of overhead power lines, or other
–4–
243239P2305Series_EN.indd 4
electric light or power circuits.
If the aerial falls down or drops, it may cause an
injury or an electric shock.
Use
1) Never place hot objects or open flame sources,
such as lighted candles or nightlights, on or
close to the TV.
High temperatures can melt plastic and lead to
fires.
2) The apparatus shall not be exposed to
dripping or splashing and that no objects
filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be
placed on the apparatus.
When liquids are spilled or small items are
dropped inside the TV, this may cause a fire or an
electric shock.
If small objects drop inside the TV, turn off the
TV and remove the power plug from the outlet
immediately and contact a service technician.
3) Never insert objects (metal or paper) or pour
water inside the TV through ventilation holes
and other openings.
These items may cause a fire or an electric shock.
If these objects are inserted inside the TV, turn
off the TV and remove the power plug from
the outlet immediately and contact a service
technician. Be especially careful that children do
not insert objects in the TV.
4) When the TV will not be used for a long period
of time, such as during vacation or travel,
remove the power plug from the wall outlet
for safety.
• The TV is not completely disconnected from
the power supply line, as minute current is
consumed even when the ! Power switch is
turned off.
• The mains plug or an appliance coupler is
used as the disconnect device, therefore
the disconnect device shall remain readily
operable.
5) Never pull on the power cord when removing
the plug from the wall outlet.
Always hold the plug firmly when removing it. If
the power cord is yanked, the cord may become
damaged and a fire or an electric shock may
occur.
6) Never cut, break, modify, twist, bunch up
or bent the cord or apply excessive force or
tension to it.
Never place heavy objects on the cord or allow
it to overheat as this may cause damage, a fire or
an electric shock. Contact a service technician if
the power cord is damaged.
7) If there is thunder or lightning, never touch
the aerial cable or other connected cables.
You may suffer an electric shock.
2013/05/23 8:28:42
 Service
1) Never repair, modify or disassemble the TV by
yourself.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Consult a service technician for inspection and
repairs.
2) When a malfunction occurs, or if smoke or
an unusual odor comes from the TV, turn off
the TV and remove the power plug from the
outlet immediately.
Make sure that the smoke or smell has stopped,
then contact a service technician. If the TV is still
used in this condition, it may cause a fire or an
electric shock.
3) If the TV is dropped or the cabinet is broken,
turn off the TV and remove the power plug
from the outlet immediately.
If the TV has power in this condition, it may
cause a fire or an electric shock. If the cabinet
is broken, be careful when handling the TV to
prevent an injury.
Contact a service technician for inspection and
repair.
4) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life,
ask a qualified service technician to properly
dispose of the TV.
Cleaning
CAUTION: Avoid using chemicals (such as air
refreshers, cleaning agents, etc.) on or near
the TV pedestal. Studies indicate that plastics
may weaken and crack over time from the
combination effects of chemical agents and
mechanical stress (such as weight of TV). Failure
to follow these instructions could result in
serious injury and/or permanent damage to TV
and TV pedestal.
1) Remove the power plug before cleaning.
Never use solvents such as benzine or
thinner to clean the TV.
• These solvents may distort the cabinet or
damage its finish.
• If rubber or vinyl products remain in contact
with the TV for a long time, a stain may result.
If the cabinet becomes dirty, clean it with a soft,
dry cloth.
When cleaning the surface of the LCD display,
wipe the panel surface gently with a soft, dry
cloth.
2) Periodically disconnect the power plug from
the outlet and check it.
If dust has collected on the power plug
connectors, clean off the dust with a dry cloth.
This dust may cause a fire due to reduced
insulation on the plug.
–5–
243239P2305Series_EN.indd 5
Important information
1) About LCD screen
• If you have the LCD screen facing to the sun,
the LCD screen will be damaged. Be aware of
locating the TV close to a window or outdoors.
• Never press the LCD screen strongly or scratch
it, and never put anything on it. These actions
will damage the LCD screen.
2) About cabinet and LCD screen
Never spray volatile compounds such as
insecticide on the cabinet and LCD screen.
This may cause a discolouration or damage the
cabinet and LCD screen.
3) Some pixels of the screen do not light up
The LCD display panel is manufactured using an
extremely high level of precision technology,
however sometimes some pixels of the screen
may be missing picture elements or have
luminous spots. This is not sign of malfunction.
4) About Interference
The LCD display may cause interference in
image, sound, etc. of other electronic equipment
that receives electromagnetic waves (e.g. AM
radios and video equipment).
5) About using under the low temperature
places
If you use the TV in the room of 0°C or less,
the picture brightness may vary until the
LCD monitor warms up. This is not a sign of
malfunction.
6) About afterimage
If a still picture is displayed, an afterimage may
remain on the screen, however it will disappear.
This is not a sign of malfunction.
Exemptions
• Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused
by fires, natural disaster (such as thunder,
earthquake, etc.), acts by third parties, accidents,
owner’s misuse, or uses in other improper
conditions.
• Toshiba is not liable for incidental damages
(such as profit loss or interruption in business,
modification or erasure of record data, etc.)
caused by use or inability to use of product.
• Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused
by neglect of the instructions described in the
owner’s manual.
• Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused by
misuse or malfunction through simultaneous use
of this product and the connected equipment.
2013/05/23 8:28:42
 Notes:
Connecting an aerial • If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if
Optimum reception of colour requires a good signal the operating range becomes reduced, replace both
and will generally mean that an outdoor aerial must batteries with new ones.
be used. • If the batteries are dead or if you will not use the
The exact type and positioning of the aerial will remote control for a long time, remove the batteries
depend upon your particular area. to prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery
Your Toshiba dealer or service personnel can best compartment.
advise you on which aerial to use in your area. Effective range
Before connecting the aerial cable, turn off all main
power switches.
VHF and/or
UHF aerial
Media Recorder TV back view
IN

OUT
within 5 m

Aerial cable TV panel controls

(75 7 coaxial) (not supplied) • You can operate your TV using the buttons on
300 7 twin-lead feeder the side panel or the remote control. The back of
the panel provide the terminal connections to
Aerial adaptor connect other equipment to your TV.
75 7
(not supplied) aerial TV front view
terminal
75 7 coaxial cable

Plug 75 7 aerial
(not supplied) terminal Left side view 1
2
Exploring your new TV
3
Installing the remote control batteries
4
Remove the battery cover.
Insert two R03 (AAA) batteries matching the –/+
polarities of the battery to the –/+ marks inside the 5
battery compartment.

1 ! (power LED) — Power indicator.

Cautions:
• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.
Batteries must not be exposed to excessive heat such
as sunshine, fire or the like.
• Attention should be drawn to the environmental
aspects of battery disposal.
• Never mix battery types or combine used batteries
with new ones.
–6–
2 USB (input terminals) — Insert your USB
storage device (photo, movie and music).
3 ! (power on/standby) — Press to turn the TV
on/ standby.
4 2 – + (volume) — These buttons adjust the
volume level.
U u (mode up/down) — When on-screen
information is displayed, a programme position
can be selected. In external input mode, an
input source can be selected.
5 p / o (on-screen information or input
source) — This button switches to the
on-screen information or the input source
selection.

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 6 2013/05/23 8:28:42

 6 o HDMI 2 (input terminal) — High-Definition 10 Picture still
Multimedia Interface input receives digital 11 Stereo/Bilingual selection
audio and uncompressed digital video from an 12 Number buttons (0-9)
HDMI device.
13 To display the Channel List
14 To return to the previous programme
Learning about the remote control 15 To display on-screen information
Initial/Index function for Teletext
8 9
16 This button turns the sound off/on
7
1
17 To exit menu
18 To access the Quick Menu
10 11
19 Teletext on/Superimpose Teletext/off
20 Teletext control buttons (Four coloured buttons:
12
13
Red, Green, Yellow, Blue)
14 21 To reveal concealed text
When using the movie / music file (Z).
15 22 To select a page while viewing a normal picture
To select the time display
16 When using the movie / music file (z).
23 To hold a wanted page
4 2 24 To enlarge the teletext display size

18 17
TV back panel connections
19
3
6
5
20
21

22
23
24

Cable holder *

1 Power on/standby — Press to turn the TV on/ Connection example

standby. TV back view
2 Programme position — These buttons select PC/HDMI 1
the programme position. (AUDIO)
DVD video player
3 MENU up/down — When a menu is on-screen, VIDEO
(2)
VIDEO
(with component
these buttons function as up/down menu Y
video outputs)
L/
navigation buttons. PB/CB MONO or
RGB/PC
When using the movie / music file (W, v) PR/CR AUDIO

MENU left/right — When a menu is on-screen, L/

MONO
R

these buttons function as left/right menu

AUDIO
navigation buttons or adjust settings.
When using the movie / music file (CC, cc) R
COMPONENT/
VIDEO INPUT AUDIO(FIXED) Set Top Box
OK — To confirm your selection. (1)

or
When using the movie / music file (c) VIDEO AUDIO
L R

4 Volume — These buttons adjust the volume IN

HDMI OUT

OUT

level.
VCR (Normal)
5 On-screen Menus HDMI device
6 To return to the previous menu
Cable holder *
7 Input source selection * You can use the cable holder to hold the aerial
8 Picture Size cable, video and audio cables etc.
9 TEXT Subtitle pages if available Never grasp the holder when moving the TV.

–7–

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 7 2013/05/23 8:28:44

 • o HDMI 1 (input terminal) — High-Definition • This TV is able to connect with HDMI devices. But
Multimedia Interface input receives digital audio it is possible that some HDMI devices may not
and uncompressed digital video from an HDMI operate properly with this TV.
device or uncompressed digital video from a DVI
device (Connect HDMI, DVI or PC etc.). Connecting HDMI or DVI devices
• o PC/HDMI 1 (AUDIO) (input terminal) — The HDMI input on your TV receives digital audio
PC audio input terminal is shared with HDMI and uncompressed digital video from an HDMI and
analogue audio input terminal, and their use can uncompressed digital video from a DVI device.
be configured in AV Connection menu of the This input is designed to accept HDCP programme
PREFERENCES menu (Connect PC or DVI etc.). material in digital from CEA-861-D compliant
• A (aerial input terminal) — Analogue aerial consumer electronic devices (such as a set top box
signal input. and DVD player with HDMI and DVI output).
• o (1) COMPONENT / VIDEO INPUT (input The HDMI input is designed for best performance
terminals) — High-definition component video with 1080i (50/60 Hz) and 1080p (24/50/60 Hz) high-
and standard (analogue) stereo audio inputs, or definition video signals, but will also accept and
standard (composite) video and standard stereo display 480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, and 720p (50/60 Hz)
audio inputs. and VGA (VESA 640 × 480 @ 60/72/75 Hz) signals.
• o (2) (video 2 input terminal) — Standard video • HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface
and standard stereo audio input. • HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection
• o RGB/PC (input terminal) — For use when • CEA-861-D compliance covers the transmission of
connecting a personal computer (PC) (Connect PC uncompressed digital video with high-bandwidth
etc.). digital content protection, which is being
• O AUDIO (output terminals) — Standard audio standardized for reception of high-definition
outputs. video signals. Because this is an evolving
Notes: technology, it is possible that some devices may
• Before connecting any external equipment, turn off not operate properly with the TV.
all main power switches. • Acceptable PC signal format:
• The unauthorized recording of TV programmes, • S-VGA: VESA 800 5 600 @ 56/60/72/75 Hz
DVDs, video tapes and other materials may infringe • XGA: VESA 1024 5 768 @ 60/70/75 Hz
upon the provisions of copyright law. • W-XGA: VESA 1280 5 768 @ 60/75 Hz
• o COMPONENT / VIDEO INPUT terminals • W-XGA: VESA 1360 5 768 @ 60 Hz
• S-XGA: VESA 1280 5 1024 @ 60 Hz
Standard mode Component mode However, these signal formats are converted to
VIDEO VIDEO
match the number of pixels of the LCD panel.
Y Y
Yellow Green Therefore, the TV may not display small text
PB/CB PB/CB
properly.
Blue
PR/CR PR/CR If you connect this unit to your PC, the compressed
Red image is displayed in S-XGA mode, therefore the
L/ L/
MONO MONO
White White picture quality may deteriorate and characters may
AUDIO AUDIO
not be read.
Red Red
R
COMPONENT/
R
COMPONENT/
(Audio) • L-PCM: Linear-Pulse Code Modulation
VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT
(1) (1) • Supported Audio format: L-PCM, Dolby Digital
sample rate 32/44,1/48 kHz
Connecting HDMI or DVI devices
• When turning on your electronic components, Connecting a computer
turn on the TV first, and then the HDMI and DVI The following signals can be display:
device. VGA: VESA 640 x 480 @ 60/72/75 Hz
• When turning off your electronic components, S-VGA: VESA 800 x 600 @ 56/60/72/75 Hz
turn off the HDMI and DVI device first, and then XGA: VESA 1024 x 768 @ 60/70/75 Hz
the TV. W-XGA: VESA 1280 x 768 @ 60/75 Hz
• This TV may not be compatible with features and/ W-XGA: 1280 x 800 @ 60/75 Hz
or specifications that may be added in the future. W-XGA: VESA 1360 x 768 @ 60 Hz
• This TV is only operable with L-PCM and Dolby W-XGA+: 1440 x 900 @ 60 Hz
Digital on 32/44.1/48 kHz. If there is no sound S-XGA: VESA 1280 x 1024 @ 60 Hz
when using HDMI, use the analogue audio cables 1920 x 1080p @ 60 Hz (Horizontal Frequency: 67.5
to connect the TV and the HDMI device, and kHz (H), Pixel Clock Frequency: 148.5 MHz)
select Analogue in HDMI 1 Audio of the AV
Connection menu (- page 13).

–8–

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 8 2013/05/23 8:28:46

 Notes: Switching off the TV
• Some PC models cannot be connected to this TV.
• If connecting a certain PC model that signal is 1 Press 1 on the remote control or ! on the TV
particular, the PC signal may not be detected left side panel to switch to the standby mode.
correctly.
Notes:
• There is no need to use an adapter for computers
• When the TV will not be used for a long period of
with DOS/V compatible mini D-sub 15 pin terminal.
time, such as during vacation or travel, remove the
• A bar may appear in the upper, lower, right or left
power plug from the wall outlet.
side of the screen, or parts of the picture may be
• The TV will automatically turn off in 15 minutes
obscured depending on some signals. This is not the
based on No Signal Power Down settings (-
malfunction.
page 17) if no signal is detected.
• If the edges of the picture are stretched, readjust the
The TV will automatically turn itself off after
picture position adjustments in the PC Settings
approximately 2 hours if you do not operate the TV
menu.
after turned on by on timer function.
• Depending on the specification of the PC you are
• If power is cut off while you are viewing the TV,
playing the DVD-Video on, and the DVD’s title, some
the Last Mode Memory function turns on the TV
scenes may be skipped, or you may not be able to
automatically when power is applied again. If power
pause during multi-angle scenes.
is going to be off for a long time and you are going
Signal names for mini D-sub 15 pin connector to be away from your TV, unplug the power cord to
prevent the TV from turning on in your absence.
Pin assignment for RGB/PC terminal
Tuning the TV for the first time
Before switching on the TV, put your decoder and
media recorder to standby, if they are connected,
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name and ensure that the aerial is connected. To setup
1 R 9 NC the TV, use the buttons on the remote control as
2 G 10 Ground detailed on page 7.
3 B 11 NC 1 Press the 1 button. The Quick Setup screen
4 NC (not 12 DDC Data will appear. This screen will appear the first time
connected) that the TV is switched on.
5 NC 13 H-sync
Quick Setup
6 Ground 14 V-sync
Menu Language English
7 Ground 15 DDC Clock
8 Ground
• Most of the picture/sound controls and functions 2 Press  or  to select the menu language.
are available. However features not available will
be greyed out. 3 Press OK, to display the Location menu.
Press  or  to select Store or Home. For
normal home use, select Home.
Turning the TV on You can select either Home or Store mode.
Home is recommended for normal home use.
Switching on the TV Select Store when using a TV for displaying in
a shop, etc.
Connect the power cord to a wall outlet, the
! power indicator lights in red (standby mode). Location

1 Press 1 on the remote control or ! on the TV

To use the TV for displaying in a store showroom, please select
[Store]. [Home] mode is recommended for normal use.
left side panel, the ! power indicator lights
in green. Home

Note:
If you watch black and white programmes when the Store mode:
Colour System mode is set to “A” (Automatic), colour • A confirmation menu will appear.
noise may appear on the screen. In this case select the • AutoView menu is not available.
appropriate Colour System (For the system of each
country or region, refer to pages 10, 28).

–9–

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 9 2013/05/23 8:28:46

 4 Press OK to display the AutoView menu
(- page 14).
Press  or  to select Yes or No.
AutoView
AutoView mode automatically adjusts picture settings to suit
ambient light conditions.
Do you wish to enable AutoView mode?
No
5 Press OK to display the Auto Tuning menu, and
then  or  to select On or Off.
Auto Tuning
Auto Signal Booster
A. Position selection
B. System (Sound) (- page 28)
C. Colour System (- page 28)
A : Automatic (factory set), P : PAL,
S : SECAM, N4 : NTSC 4.43 (MHz),
N3 : NTSC 3.58 (MHz)
If the colour of a certain channel is abnormal,
the automatic colour system selection (A)
may have malfunctioned, or sound system
selection is wrong. In such a case, select
another colour and/or sound system (-
page 28).
D. Position skip selection
Press  or  to turn the position skip option
On

Start Scan on “8” or off “(”. The position will then be

skipped when you select channels with PU
or Pu. The “8” mark will appear beside a
6 Select Start Scan and press OK to start the position number when you use the Number
automatic search. button on the remote control.
Auto Tuning
E. Signal Class
Progress Found The channel classification.
1% 0
F. Channel
When the automatic search is completed, The channel number on which a station is
the TV will automatically appear the Manual being broadcast.
Tuning menu. G. Channel search operation
Use the Manual Tuning operation if desired Press  to search up the band or  to search
channels cannot be preset with the Auto down the band.
Tuning or if you would like to preset channels Press  or  repeatedly until your desired
to specific position numbers one by one. channel is displayed.
When a station is found, it will be displayed.
Manual Tuning
NEVER PRESS ANY OTHER BUTTONS WHILE
Pos. Label
THE SET IS TUNING.
0

1
H.Manual Fine Tuning
Press  or  until better picture and sound
2
are obtained.
3
I. Signal Booster
4
If the receiving signal is weak/strong and the
5
picture is noisy, the picture may be improved
6 when using this function.
7 Press the  or  to turn the Signal Booster
On or Off.
J. Label
7 Press  or  to select the programme position Station labels appear under the programme
you want to arrange and press OK to display the position display each time you turn on the TV,
breakdown menu. select a channel, or press .
Press  or  to select an item, then press  or To change or create station labels:
 to select the item as shown below. 1) Press  or  repeatedly to select a
Manual Tuning
character for the first space, then press 
Position or .
1 B/G A C 1 0 On

(blank space)
A C E G I
B D F H J

– 10 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 10 2013/05/23 8:28:46

 2) Repeat step 1) to enter the rest of the Displaying the menu chart
characters. If you would like a blank space
in the label name, you must choose a
blank space from the list of characters.
PICTURE

Press OK to store your settings. PICTURE

Picture Settings
Notes: 3D Colour Management On
• The Quick Setup, Location, Auto Tuning, Manual Base Colour Adjustment
Active Backlight Control On
Tuning menu can also be display at any time from
the SETUP menu.
• When you preset the channel which sound of
broadcast transmission system adopts “M” system
(- page 28), the sound system may not be tuned
correctly if the radio waves transmit badly. At that
time, preset the channel by Manual Tuning. SOUND

Using the Quick Menu SOUND

MTS Auto

Press QUICK to display the Quick Menu and use 

Dual Dual 1
Balance 0
or  to select the option. Advanced Sound Settings
Audio Distortion Control On
Dynamic Range Control Off
Quick Menu Audio Level Offset 0
Spectrum Analyser
Picture Mode Dynamic
Sound Mode Dynamic
Media Player
Sleep Timer
Power Bass Booster
00:00
Off
APPLICATIONS
Signal Booster On

APPLICATIONS
Media Player

Note: On Timer
00:00
Sleep Timer
Quick Menu items are different depending on the
current mode.

Quick menu item Description

Picture Mode - page 14.
Sound Mode - page 15.
PREFERENCES
Media Player - page 19.
Sleep Timer - page 16.
PREFERENCES
Power Bass Booster - page 16. Teletext Auto
Teletext Language 1
Signal Booster - page 10. Panel Lock Off
Display Settings
Interval Time - page 21. AV Connection
Energy Saving Settings
SOUND - page 15.
Blue Screen On
Repeat - pages 22, 23.
PICTURE - page 14.
Device Information - page 20.
SETUP

Learning about the menu system SETUP

Menu Language English
We suggest you familiarize yourself with the display SETUP
Auto Tuning
Language English
charts before using the menu system: Manual Tuning
Auto Tuning
• Press MENU to display menu, then press  or  Quick Setup
Manual Tuning
Location Home
Colour System Auto
to select main menu headings. Software Licences
Quick Setup
• Press  or  to select an item. System Information
Location
Reset TV
Home

• Press  or  to select or adjust setting.

• Press OK to display the next menu.
• Press EXIT to close the menu.
• Press RETURN to return the previous menu.
– 11 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 11 2013/05/23 8:28:46


Watching TV programmes
Selecting the menu language
You can select a language for the on-screen display.
• Use the menu: SETUP
• Use the item: Menu Language
Changing the position
1 Enter the desired position number using the
Number buttons on the remote control.
For positions below 10, use 0 and the required
number e.g., for position 1.
2 You can also change the position by using PU
or Pu.
The position will be displayed on the screen
with the Mono/Stereo/Dual audio status.
Note:
Changing positions between different format channels
takes several seconds.
Switching between two positions
You can switch two positions without entering
actual position number each time.
1 Select the first position you want to view.
2 Select the second position with the Number
buttons (0-9).
3 Press . The previous channel will be displayed.
Each time you press , the TV will switch back and
forth between the two positions.
Displaying the on-screen information
1 Press to display the following on-screen
information.
4 ABCD Stereo
The information will disappear in several
seconds.
To erase the display instantly, press again.
Sorting positions
Ex.: To swap channel ABCD (Prog.1) for channel
MNOP (Prog.4):
1 From the SETUP menu, press  or  to select
Manual Tuning menu, and then press OK.
2 Press  or  to select the channel ABCD, then
press .
– 12 –
243239P2305Series_EN.indd 12
Manual Tuning
Pos. Label
0
1 ABCD
2 EFGH
3 IJKL
4 MNOP
5
6
7
3 Press  to select the new position “4”, then
press .
4 Press  to select the channel MNOP, then press
.
5 Press  to select the new position “1”, then
press .
6 Confirm new Manual Tuning menu.
Selecting the external input source to view
1 Press o on the remote control until the
external input mode list appears on the screen,
then press ,  or o to select appropriate
input source (or touch p / o and U or u on
the TV left side panel to select required input
source directly).
2 Press OK.
TV (analogue aerial input),
VIDEO1 (o (1), COMPONENT/VIDEO NPUT,
standard or component video input),
VIDEO2 (o (2), standard video input),
HDMI 1 (HDMI 1 input),
HDMI 2 (HDMI 2 input),
PC (o RGB/PC, PC input)
Labeling external input sources
These input labels are shown in the input selector.
You can label external inputs according to the
devices you have connected to the TV.
1 From the PREFERENCES menu, press  or 
to select AV Connection and then press OK.
2 Press  or  to select Input Labelling and
then press OK.
3 Press  or  to select the item you want to
label and press  or  to select --, Amplifier,
Cable, DVD, Game, PC, Recorder, Satellite or
VCR, or press the RED button to turn on the
skip.
2013/05/23 8:28:46
 4:3
Channel List Use this setting to view a true 4:3 broadcast.
1 Press the LIST button.
The Channel List will appear.
2 Press  or  to select a channel, and press OK
to watch.

Selecting the PC/HDMI 1 Audio mode Super Live

This setting will enlarge a 4:3 image to fit the screen
You can select PC audio or HDMI audio when using by stretching the image horizontally and vertically,
this function. holding better proportions at the centre of the
• Use the menus: PREFERENCES and AV image. Some distortion may occur.
Connection
• Use the item: PC/HDMI 1 Audio
• Use the modes: PC and HDMI 1

Setting the HDMI 1 Audio mode

You can select sound of an HDMI or DVI device PC Normal
connected to the HDMI 1 input terminals from three
Use this setting for PC connected via HDMI or RGB/
modes: Auto, Digital or Analogue.
PC terminal when receiving PC signal format. This
• Use the menus: PREFERENCES and AV
setting will display the image correctly without
Connection
distortion or picture clipping.
• Use the item: HDMI 1 Audio

Picture adjustment
Selecting the Picture Size
1 Press repeatedly to select the desired
PC Wide
Picture Size.
Use this setting for PC connected via HDMI or RGB/
Native PC terminal when receiving PC signal format. This
This setting will display the image correctly without setting will display the image without picture
distortion or picture clipping. clipping.

Wide Dot by Dot

Use this setting when watching a wide-screen DVD,
widescreen video tape or a 16:9 broadcast (when
available). Due to the range of wide-screen formats
(16:9, 14:9, 20:9 etc.), you may see bars on the top
and bottom of the screen.
“Dot by Dot” is a non-scaling display. Depending on
the input signal format, the picture is displayed with
side panels and/or bars at the top and bottom (e.g.
VGA input source).

– 13 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 13 2013/05/23 8:28:46

 Normal
Sets the size to full screen without changing the
aspect ratio when watching a movie stored on a USB
device.
Zoom
Sets the size to full screen keeping the 21:9
circularity ratio when watching a movie stored on a
USB device.
Notes:
• Using the special functions to change the size of
the displayed image (e.g. changing the height/
width ratio) for the purpose of public display or
commercial gain may infringe on copyright laws.
• If the aspect ratio of the selected format is different
from the one of the TV transmission or video
programme, it can cause a difference in vision.
Change to the correct aspect ratio picture size.
• When using the PC connected via HDMI or RGB/
PC terminal, the moving image quality may be
deteriorated.
Using the picture still
• Press to freeze the picture.
Even if an image is frozen on the TV screen, the
pictures are running on the input source. Audio
continues to be output as well.
To return to a moving picture, press again.
(Moving ) ( S till)
Note:
If you use this function except for the purpose of your
private viewing and listening, it may infringe the
copyright protected by the copyright laws.
Activating the Picture Mode
This TV offers the choice of personalising the picture
style.
AutoView, Dynamic, Standard, Mild, Movie, Eco
Mode, Cricket/Football, Game and PC are preset
options and affect many features/settings within
the TV.
• Use the menus: PICTURE and Picture Settings
• Use the item: Picture Mode
– 14 –
243239P2305Series_EN.indd 14
Notes:
• If using Eco Mode will be changed the dark screen,
and you will be able to reduce power consumption.
The Backlight mode is not available in the Eco
Mode.
• Game mode is available in external input mode
(other than aerial input). When you select Game
mode, suitable widescreen formats will be selected.
• PC mode is available in RGB/PC input mode or HDMI
input mode.
Activating the picture preferences
You can customise current Picture Mode settings
as desired.
• Use the menus: PICTURE and Picture Settings
• Use the items: Backlight, Contrast, Brightness,
Colour, Tint and Sharpness
Setting the Contrast Booster
Contrast Booster improves the contrast of the
picture.
• Use the menus: PICTURE and Picture Settings
• Use the item: Contrast Booster
• Use the modes: High, Off, Low and Middle
Using the Cinema Mode
A movie film’s picture runs at 24 frames a second,
whereas movie software such as DVD, etc., that you
enjoy watching on TV at home runs at 30 (NTSC)
or 25 (PAL) frames a second. To convert this signal
to reproduce a smooth motion and picture quality,
select the On mode.
Effective signal and setup conditions:
• When the Video input mode is selected.
• When the input signal format is 480i, 576i or 1080i
signals.
• Use the menus: PICTURE and Picture Settings
• Use the item: Cinema Mode
Note:
When a DVD movie with subtitle is playing back, this
mode may not work correctly.
Adjusting the Colour Temperature
Colour Temperature increases the warmth or
coolness of the picture by setting the red, green or
blue tint.
• Use the menus: PICTURE and Picture Settings
• Use the items: Colour Temperature, Red Level,
Green Level and Blue Level
• Use the modes: Cool, Natural and Warm
Resetting the Colour Temperature
• Use the menus: PICTURE, Picture Settings and
Colour Temperature
• Use the item: Reset (select Yes and press OK)
2013/05/23 8:28:47
 Resetting the Picture Settings
• Use the menus: PICTURE and Picture Settings
• Use the item: Reset (select Yes and press OK)
Activating the Noise Reduction (NR)
If the receiving signal of MPEG is a mosquito
(grained) noise depending on the compression and
conversion, the picture is weak and the picture is
blurry, the picture may be improved when using this
function.
• Use the menus: PICTURE, Picture Settings and
Noise Reduction
• Use the items: Auto Clean, MPEG NR and DNR
• Use the modes: Low, Middle, High and Off
Adjusting the Colour Management
Selecting the Dual 1 or Dual 2 mode
You can hear only Dual 1 or Dual 2 sound selected,
whenever bilingual programmes are received.
• Use the menu: SOUND
• Use the item: Dual
Notes:
• When the MTS setting is in Mono mode, the Dual
menu is not selectable.
• The Dual menu setting status remains even if the TV
is turned off.
Selecting the stereo programmes
When a stereo programme is received, d Stereo
appears and press s.
• Use the modes: Stereo and Mono

You can adjust the picture colour quality by Selecting the bilingual programmes
selecting from 6 base colour adjustments : Red,
Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta or Cyan. When a bilingual programme is received, j Dual
• Use the menus: PICTURE, 3D Colour appears and press s.
Management (On) and Base Colour Adjustment Sound to be heard
• Use the items: Hue, Saturation and Brightness Display German stereo/
NICAM
bilingual broadcast
Resetting the Base Colour Adjustment
j Dual 1 Sub I sound Main sound
• Use the menus: PICTURE, 3D Colour J Dual 2 Sub II sound Sub sound
Management (On) and Base Colour Adjustment
e Mono Main sound —
• Use the item: Reset

Using the Active Backlight Control Note:

In order to improve screen visibility, the Active
Backlight Control sets the screen brightness
automatically during dark scenes.
• Use the menu: PICTURE
• Use the item: Active Backlight Control
Sound adjustment
Setting the MTS (Multi-channel TV Sound)
Auto mode
The MTS Auto mode automatically recognize
stereo/bilingual programmes depending on the
broadcast signal.
Mono mode
If you experience noise or poor reception of any
stereo/bilingual programme, set the MTS mode to
Mono.
Noise will be reduced and reception may improve.
• Use the menu: SOUND
• Use the item: MTS
Note:
If you experience noise with a particular programme
on whose channel reception is usually good, try setting
MTS mode to Auto, then press s to switch to
e Mono (monaural).
These settings are not stored in the TV memory.
Selecting the monaural programmes
If sound distortion, interruptions or silence arises in
the low sound volume level, setting the e Mono 2
mode will mitigate the problem.
When a monaural programme is received, e Mono
appears and press s.
• Use the modes: Mono 1 and Mono 2
Note:
On some cases, the reception of stereo/bilingual
broadcasts may not be possible after switching on the
e Mono 2 mode.
Adjusting the sound Balance
• Use the menu: SOUND and Balance
• Use the button:  and 
Using the Sound Mode
Choose your preferred Sound Mode.
• Use the menu: SOUND, Advanced Sound
Settings
• Use the item: Sound Mode
• Use the modes: Dynamic, Natural and Clear
Voice

– 15 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 15 2013/05/23 8:28:47

 Adjusting the sound quality
You can adjust the basic sound quality.
• Use the menu: SOUND, Advanced Sound
Settings
• Use the items: Bass and Treble
• Use the button:  and 
Using the Power Bass Booster
Power Bass Booster helps to create rich bass.
• Use the menu: SOUND, Advanced Sound
Settings
• Use the item: Power Bass Booster
• Use the modes: Super, Normal and Off
Resetting the Advanced Sound Settings
• Use the menus: SOUND, Advanced Sound
Settings and Reset
• Use the item: Reset (select Yes and press OK)
Using the Dynamic Range Control
This feature allows control of compression for Dolby
Digital.
• Use the menu: SOUND
• Use the item: Dynamic Range Control
Using the Audio Distortion Control
Prevents audio distortion.
• Use the menu: SOUND
• Use the item: Audio Distortion Control
• Use the modes: On and Off
Using the Audio Level Offset
Sometimes there can be large changes in volume
when switching from an ATV channel or an external
input. Using this feature reduces these volume
differences.
• Use the menu: SOUND
• Use the item: Audio Level Offset
• Use the button:  and 
Using the Spectrum Analyser
Shows sound in a visual format.
• Use the menus: SOUND
• Use the item: Spectrum Analyser
Note:
The Spectrum Analyser display turns off when any
other procedure is performed.
– 16 –
243239P2305Series_EN.indd 16
Other features settings
Setting the On Timer and Sleep Timer
The Timer is especially useful if you want the TV to
turn itself on or off after a selected period of time.
• Use the menu: APPLICATIONS
• Use the items: On Timer and Sleep Timer
• Use the button: OK, Number buttons (0-9),  and

Configure the following settings in On Timer:
Enable On Timer: Select On or Off.
Input: Select an input source.
Position: Select a channel.
Volume: Select a volume.
Time Until Power On: Set a time until the timer
turns on.
After configuring the settings, select Done and
press OK.
Press EXIT to exit the menu. Set the Standby
mode by pressing 1 on the remote control.
Note:
The TV will automatically turn itself off after
approximately 2 hours if you do not operate the TV
after turned on by on timer function.
Using the Auto Format
When the TV receives a true HDMI signal picture
and the Auto Format is On, it will automatically be
displayed in HDMI signal format, irrespective of the
TV’s previous setting.
• Use the menu: PREFERENCES and Display
Settings
• Use the item: Auto Format
Activating Blue Screen
With the Blue Screen function On, the screen
will automatically turn blue and the sound will be
muted (except for external input) when no signal is
being received.
• Use the menu: PREFERENCES
• Use the item: Blue Screen
Setting the Automatic Power Down
The TV will automatically turn itself off (standby)
after approximately 4 hours, if you don’t touch the
control buttons on the remote control or on the TV
control panel.
• Use the menu: PREFERENCES and Energy Saving
Settings
• Use the item: Automatic Power Down
2013/05/23 8:28:47
 Setting the No Signal Power Down
The TV will automatically turn itself off after 15
minutes when no signal is detected. You can change
the setting to Off.
Default setting is all On.
• Use the menu: PREFERENCES and Energy Saving
Settings
• Use the item: No Signal Power Down
Notes:
• Low signal strength of channel (no signal detection)
• Only Audio L/R is connected to external input to
listen to music through the TV speakers.
• A warning message will appear 1 minute before
turning off.
Panel Lock
Panel Lock disables the buttons on the TV. All
buttons on the remote control can still be used.
• Use the menu: PREFERENCES
• Use the item: Panel Lock
Note:
When Panel Lock is On, a reminder will appear when
the buttons on the TV are pressed.
If the standby button is pressed, the TV will switch off
and can only be brought out of standby by using the
remote control.
Activating the 4:3 Stretch
When 4:3 Stretch is activated, this function will
switch 4:3 format programmes into a full screen
picture.
• Use the menu: PREFERENCES and Display
Settings
• Use the item: 4:3 Stretch
Note:
In HDMI signal format, this function is available.
Viewing the Software Licences
The licences for the software used in this TV are
available for viewing on screen.
• Use the menu: SETUP
• Use the item: Software Licences
• Use the button: OK
A screen will appear displaying all of the licencing
information required for the TV’s software.
Setting the Colour System
This feature is available in Standard video
(composite) inputs mode.
• Use the menu: SETUP and Colour System
• Use the item: Auto, PAL, SECAM, NTSC 4.43 or
NTSC 3.58
Note:
Confi rm that Colour System is set to “Auto”. If not,
select “Auto” with  or .
– 17 –
243239P2305Series_EN.indd 17
Viewing the System Information
This feature can be used to check the version of
software currently installed.
• Use the menu: SETUP
• Use the item: System Information
• Use the button: OK
Resetting the TV
Reset TV will reset all TV settings, including stored
channels, to their original factory values.
• Use the menu: SETUP
• Use the item: Reset (select Yes and press OK)
Note:
When the set powers back on, the first time screen will
appear (- page 9).
Teletext
This TV has a multi-page Teletext memory, which
takes a few moments to load and it offers two
ways of viewing Teletext Auto and List which are
explained below.
Setting up the Teletext mode
To select a language for Teletext:
The language 1-4 option enables the display of
different language when using Teletext.
• Use the menu: PREFERENCES
• Use the item: Teletext Language
Language 1: English, German, Dutch, Flemish,
Russian, Bulgarian, Ukranian, Lettish, Lithuanian,
Czech, Slovak, Estonian
Language 2: Polish, German, Dutch, Flemish,
Estonian, Lettish, Lithuanian, French, Serbian,
Croatian, Slovenian, Czech, Slovak, Rumanian
Language 3: English, French, Hebrew, Turkish,
Arabic
Language 4: English, French, Hebrew, Turkish,
Farsi (Iranian/Persian)
To select Teletext mode:
Select a channel position with the desired Teletext
service.
• Use the menu: PREFERENCES
• Use the item: Teletext
• Use the modes: Auto and List
2013/05/23 8:28:47
 Teletext general information
TEXT button
Pressing TEXT once will bring up the teletext screen.
Press again to superimpose the teletext over a
normal broadcast picture. Press again to return
to normal TV mode. You need to return to normal
viewing if you wish to change channels.
When you first press TEXT to access the text service,
the first page you see will be the initial page.
In Auto mode, this displays the main subjects
available and their relevant page numbers.
In List mode, you will see the page numbers
currently stored on the each colour button.
Sub-pages:
Once in this chosen page, if there are sub-pages
they will automatically load into memory without
changing the one you are reading. If there are many
sub-pages, it will take a long time for them all to
load and this will depend on the speed with which
the broadcaster transmits them.
To access the sub-pages in memory, press  or 
to view them.
Using Subtitles
1 Press SUBTITLE on the remote control while
the teletext screen is displayed to display
subtitles. While the subtitles are displayed, press
SUBTITLE again to change the setting.
Using Auto mode
There are two Modes: Auto will display FASTEXT, if
available. List will display your four favorite pages.
In either mode, as an alternative to the coloured
buttons, you can access a page by entering a 3-digit
number, using the Number buttons on the remote
control, or to advance to the next page, press PU, to
go back to the previous page press Pu. To change
between Auto and List, see above.
• Press TEXT to access teletext.
100 Sport 14:57:55
Football Baseball Racing Swimming
Green Blue
Red Yellow
– 18 –
243239P2305Series_EN.indd 18
If FASTEXT is available, you will see 4 coloured titles
at the base of the TV screen. To access any given
subject, simply press the relevant coloured button
on the remote control.
If FASTEXT is not available, you can access any
page simply by entering a 3-digit page number or
pressing the corresponding coloured button.
For further information on your particular text
system(s), see the broadcast teletext index page or
consult your local Toshiba dealer.
Using List mode
1 Press TEXT to access teletext.
100 TEXT M00 14:58:55
100 101 102 103
Green Blue
Red Yellow
The four choices at the bottom of the screen are
now number — 100, 101, 102 and 103, which
have been programmed into the TV’s memory.
2 To view these pages, use the coloured prompt
buttons.
e.g. press the Green button to view page 101.
3 If you want to change these stored pages, press
the coloured button for the colour you want to
change.
e.g. Press the Green button and enter the
3-digit number.
This number will change.
4 Press OK to store your choice. The bars at the
bottom of the screen will flash white.
5 You may view other pages by simply entering
the 3-digit page number — but NEVER press OK
or you will lose the favorite already stored.
Teletext buttons on the remote control
Below is an introduction to the teletext buttons on
your remote control and their functions.
To display a page of teletext:
Press TEXT to display teletext. Press again to
superimpose the teletext over a normal broadcast
picture. Press again to return to normal TV mode.
To display an index/initial page:
In Auto-mode
Press to access the index page. The one
displayed is dependant on the broadcaster.
2013/05/23 8:28:47
 In List-mode
Press to return to the 100 page or initial
page.
To reveal concealed text:
Some pages cover topics such as quizzes and jokes.
To discover the solutions, press . Adjusting the Clock Phase of the picture
To hold a wanted page:
This function is included as it is part of the broadcast
teletext system but you will not need it as this TV
allows you to control the display of sub-pages.
To enlarge the teletext display size:
Press once to enlarge the top half of the page,
press again to enlarge the bottom half of the page.
Press again to revert to the normal size.
To select a page while viewing a normal picture:
When in teletext mode, if a page selection is made
and then is pressed, a normal picture will be
displayed. The TV will indicate when the page is
present by displaying the title bar of the text page at
the top of the screen. Press TEXT to view the page.
Note:
It will not be possible to change programme position
while in Teletext mode, you will have to cancel the
teletext first by pressing TEXT to return to a normal TV
picture.
To select the time display:
If you press while watching a normal TV
broadcast, you will see a time display from the
broadcaster. It will remain on the screen for about 5
seconds.
9:56 and 25 seconds p.m.
21:56:25
Adjusting the picture position
• Use the menus: PREFERENCES, Display Settings
and PC Settings
• Use the items: Horizontal Position and Vertical
Position
If the Clock Phase, which synchronize the PC signal
and LCD display, is not optimized, the picture will
blur.
This function enables you to adjust Clock Phase
and display a clear picture.
• Use the menus: PREFERENCES, Display Settings
and PC Settings
• Use the item: Clock Phase
Adjusting the Sampling Clock
If the Sampling Clock does not match with the dot
clock frequency of the PC, blurred picture detail will
occur, or screen width will change, or drift patterns
in vertical lines may be apparent.
This function enables you to adjust it and optimize
the picture.
• Use the menus: PREFERENCES, Display Settings
and PC Settings
• Use the item: Sampling Clock
Resetting the PC Settings
The Reset function adjusts the PC Settings to the
factory settings.
• Use the menus: PREFERENCES, Display Settings
and PC Settings
• Use the item: Reset (select Yes and press OK)
Note:
When a PC is connected using HDMI none of these
function will be available.

Using the Media Player

This TV allows you to enjoy movie, music and photo
files stored on a USB device connected to the USB
port.

Terminology
Using the PC Settings The TV can control and play content from a USB
• First connect the PC and press o until the video device.
input mode list appears on the screen, then press
 or  and OK in order to select the PC input Notes:
mode (- page 12). • Do not insert/remove USB device while in use.
• This function may not be available for some signal • MENU is not available during playback.
or if no signal is received. Media Player Specifications
• The optimum points of the Clock Phase
and Sampling Clock adjustments may be Device
incomprehensible according to the input signals. USB device
Interface version: USB2.0 HS
USB Mass Storage Class devices (MSC)

– 19 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 19 2013/05/23 8:28:47

 Notes:
• Connectivity is not guaranteed for all devices.
• Incorrect behaviour may occur with a USB hub
connection.
• Turn off the TV before connecting a USB HDD
devices.
• The Auto Format function is not available.
• The aspect ratio may not be correct in some cases.
File system: FAT16 and FAT32
You must obtain any required permission
from copyright owners to download or use
copyrighted content. TOSHIBA cannot and does
not grant such permission.
To select a file in the Multi View:
1 Press , ,  or  to select a file or folder.
Select a file and press OK to start playback.
Select a folder and press OK to move to the
next layer.
To return to the previous layer, press RETURN.
To display the device information:
1 Press QUICK to open the Quick Menu.
2 Press  or  to select Device Information.
To close the Media Player:

Basic operation 1 Press EXIT.

Viewing photo files

Using Media Player
When Auto Start is enabled, you will be asked if There are three types of viewing modes.
you want to start the Media Player whenever a USB Multi View
device is inserted. If Auto Start is disabled, you must
manually start the Media Player from the menu. This view allows you to search for photos in a grid
format.
To change the Auto Start setting: The pictures are displayed using thumbnail data in
each image file.
1 From the APPLICATIONS menu, press  or 
to select Media Player and press OK. Photo
/C:

2 Press  or  to select Setup and press OK.

3 Press  or  to select Auto Start and press  XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg

or  to select On or Off.
Auto Start: XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg

1 Insert USB device into the USB socket on the left XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg XXXXXXXX.jpg

side of the TV. A prompt will appear.

2 Press  or  to select Yes and press OK. The initial highlighted position will be on the top
3 Press  or  to select Photo, Movie or Music left thumbnail in the Multi View.
and press OK. 1 Press , ,  or  to select a photo or folder.
Multi View will appear. PU / Pu buttons can be used to page up/down
the Multi View when there are more photos
Note: than will fit onto one screen.
If Auto Start is set to Off, you can start the Media
Player manually. 2 When you select a folder, press OK to move to
the next layer. Press RETURN to move back to
Manual Start: the previous layer.

1 Insert USB device into the USB socket on the left 3 Press OK to view the selected photo in Single
side of the TV. View mode.

2 From the APPLICATIONS menu, press  or 

to select Media Player and press OK.
3 Press  or  to select Photo, Movie or Music
and press OK.
Multi View will appear.

– 20 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 20 2013/05/23 8:28:47

 Single View Viewing movie files
In this mode, only files located in the selected You can select movies from a Multi View of
directory will be displayed. This view allows you available files.
to change the photo content manually. When
moving from Multi View to Single View, the currently Multi View
selected photo will be displayed.
Movie

1 Press  to view the next photo. Press  to view /C:

the previous photo.

2 Press  to rotate the image 90° clockwise. Press XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXXX.mpg XXXXXXXX.mpg XXXXXXXX.mpg XXXXXXXX.mpg

 to rotate the image 90° counterclockwise.

Slide Show XXXXXXXX.mpg XXXXXXXX.mpg XXXXXXXX.mpg XXXXXXXX.mpg

This view allows you to watch a slide show of

your photos. In this mode, only files located in the
selected directory will be played.
1 To start slideshow, press OK in the Single View
mode.
2 Press  or  to view the previous/next photo.
3 Press to display file status information.
Note:
Pressing  or  while in the Slide Show mode will
stop the slideshow and rotate the photo.
To set Interval Time setting:
1 Press QUICK to open the Quick Menu.
2 Press  or  to select Interval Time.
3 Press  or  to select 3sec, 5sec, 10sec, 15sec,
30sec, 60sec, or 90sec.
To zoom in/out photos
During the Single View mode or Slide Show mode,
the zoom function can be used.
RED button (Zoom in)
x1 S x2 S x4 S x8 zoom
GREEN button (Zoom out)
x8 S x4 S x2 S x1 zoom
RETURN button: Normal playback
  buttons: Vertical or Horizontal scrolling
Note:
Using the zoom function while in the Slide Show
mode will stop the slideshow and zoom in the photo.
To close the Photo Viewer
1 Press EXIT.
File Compatibility
See page 24
1 Press , ,  or  to select a file or folder. PU
/ Pu buttons can be used to page up/down the
Multi View when there are more files than will
fit onto one screen.
2 When you select a folder, press OK to move to
the next layer. Press RETURN to move back to
the previous layer.
3 With the desired file selected, press OK or 
(play) to start playback.
4 Press v to stop playback.
Note:
If playback finishes before v is pressed, the screen will
return to the Multi View.
During playback:
• Press W to pause.
PAUSE may not be available depending on the
contents.
• To resume normal playback, press  (play).
• To play in fast reverse or fast forward directions,
press CC or cc during playback. Each time you
press the CC or cc, the playback speed will
change.
• Press z to skip to the beginning of the next
chapter. Double-tap it to skip to the next content.
Press Z to skip to the beginning of the current
chapter. Double-tap it to return to the previous
content.
If the content is not categorized into chapters,
press z to skip to the next content, or press Z to
skip to the beginning of the current content. Press
Z again to skip to the beginning of the previous
content.
• Press to display the file status information
(content number, movie title, progress time etc.).

– 21 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 21 2013/05/23 8:28:49

 Notes:
• The information may not be correctly displayed
depending on the contents.
• During playback, you can adjust the PICTURE and
SOUND menu functions from the Quick Menu.
• The playback speed (CC / cc) may not change
depending on the contents.
To select subtitle and audio languages
• Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select your
preferred subtitle language.
• Press s repeatedly to select your preferred
audio language.
Note:
This feature is not available depending on the
contents.
Setting the repeat mode
1 Press QUICK to open the Quick Menu.
2 Press  or  to select Repeat.
3 Press  or  to select Off, All or 1.
Mode Description
Off The file is played back only once.
All Files in the same folder are repeatedly
played back.
1 The same file is repeatedly played back.
4 Press RETURN.
Resume Play
You can resume playback from where it was last
stopped.
Press v while playing the movie to memorize the
stopped position.
On the Multi View screen, if you select a movie
whose stopped position has been memorized, the
message “Resume Play?” will appear. Select Yes to
resume playback from the last stopped position.
Note:
If you play different content or exit Media Player, the
memorized stopped position will be deleted.
To close the Movie Viewer
1 Press EXIT.
File Compatibility
See page 24.
To register your TV to a DivX® account:
This TV allows you to play back files purchased
or rented from DivX® Video-On Demand (VOD)
services. When you purchase or rent DivX® VOD
files on the internet, you will be asked to enter a
registration code.
– 22 –
243239P2305Series_EN.indd 22
1 From the Media Player menu, press  or  to
select Setup and press OK.
2 Press  or  to select DivX® VOD and press
OK.
3 Press  or  to highlight DivX® VOD
Registration and press OK.
4 The DivX® VOD window will appear and you
will see the registration code. For details on
registration, please visit the DivX® website at
http://vod.divx.com.
5 Copy the activation file to a memory device and
play it on the TV.
To deregister your device
1 In step 3 above, highlight DivX® VOD
Deregistration, and then press OK.
2 A confirmation message will appear. Select Yes
and press OK.
3 The DivX® VOD window will appear and you
will see the deregistration code. For details on
deregistration, please visit the DivX® website at
http://vod.divx.com.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video
format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi
Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device
that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more
information and software tools to convert your files
into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order to play
purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To
obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD
section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.
com for more information on how to complete your
registration.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® and DivX Plus® HD
(H.264/MKV) video up to 1080p HD including
premium content.
To playback DivX Plus HD content:
• To play in fast reverse or fast forward directions,
press CC or cc during playback. Each time you
press CC or cc, the playback speed will change.
• This TV generates original chapter point in 10%
increments for 10 chapters in total, that are
accessible by using the Number buttons on the
remote control.
During playback, press z to skip to the beginning
of the next chapter. Double-tap it to skip to the next
content. If z is pressed at the last chapter, playback
will skip to the beginning of the next content.
Press Z to skip to the beginning of the current
chapter. Double-tap it to return to the previous
content.
2013/05/23 8:28:49
 The Number button is used for direct jump. If the 4 Press v to stop playback.
3 button is pressed, playback will jump to the Notes:
beginning of 4th chapter. • Depending on the file size, it may take some time for
Even if the playback content has authored chapters, playback to begin.
the Number button is used to jump directly to Auto • During playback, you can adjust the SOUND menu
Generated Chapter. functions from the Quick Menu.
If the content has Authored Chapters, Z / z are
using for Authored Chapters. During playback:
Notes: • Press W to pause.
• When a rental file is played, Z or z cannot be used • To resume normal playback, press c (play).
to move between the files. PAUSE may not be available depending on the
• The above operations cannot be performed contents.
depending on the content. • To play in fast reverse or fast forward directions,
• The playback speed (CC / cc) may not change press CC or cc during playback. Each time you
depending on the stream. press CC or cc, the playback speed will change.
• Press z to skip to the next track. Press Z to skip
To playback DivX Plus HD content: to the beginning of the current track. Press Z
DivX Plus HD files may contain up to 100 titles. again to skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
You can change the title (It contains same video file)
by pressing the RED button. To set the repeat mode:
When the RED button is pressed, it will display the
title change window at the bottom on the screen 1 Press QUICK to open the Quick Menu.
(same as Subtitle or Audio change window). 2 Press  or  to select Repeat.
The title is changed cyclically each time the RED
button is pressed. Playback will start from start time 3 Press  or  to select Off, All or 1.
of selected title every press RED button. Mode Description
Note:
Off Files in the same folder are played back
The above operations cannot be performed depending
on the content. once.
All Files in the same folder are repeatedly
Playing music files played back.
You can listen to music from a Multi View of 1 The same file is repeatedly played back.
available files.
Multi View
4 Press RETURN.
To display the file status information
Music
//MP3

1 Press during playback. The information will

be displayed on the centre of the screen.
2
XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXXX.mp3 XXXXXXXX.mp3 XXXXXXXX.mp3 XXXXXXXX.mp3

Press again to remove the information.

XXXXXXXX.mp3 XXXXXXXX.mp3 XXXXXXXX.mp3 XXXXXXXX.mp3
Note:
The information may not be correctly displayed
depending on the contents.
Closing the Music Player:

1 Press , ,  or  to select a file or folder. PU 1 Press EXIT.

/ Pu buttons can be used to page up/down the File Compatibility
Multi View when there are more files than will
fit onto one screen. See page 26.

2 When you select a folder, press OK to move to

the next layer. Press RETURN to move back to
the previous layer.
3 With the desired file selected, press OK or c
(play) to start playback.

– 23 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 23 2013/05/23 8:28:49

 Media Player Supported Formats
Media Media File
Video/Audio codec Note
Player Format Extention
JPEG .jpg JPEG Data compatibility: JPEG Exif ver 2.1
.jpeg Maximum number of files: 4096 per
folder

*) Some files may not be played

PNG .png PNG depending on file size.
Photo

BMP .bmp BMP

AVI .avi Video) MPEG-2 Maximum number of files: 4096 per

H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) folder
DivX Plus HD Maximum viewable resolution:
Xvid 1920x1080
MJPEG
Sorenson H.263 (FLV1) *) Some files may not be played
VC-1 (WMV9)
Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer2
MPEG-1/2 Layer3
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
L-PCM
ADPCM
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
Movie MPEG-4 HE-AAC
WMA7/8/9 Std
MPEG-2 .mpg Video) MPEG-1 Video
PS .mpeg MPEG-2 Video
.dat Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer2
MPEG-1/2 Layer3
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
L-PCM
MPEG-2 .ts Video) MPEG-2 Video
TS .trp H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
.tp VC-1 (WMV9)
.m2ts Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer2
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
L-PCM

– 24 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 24 2013/05/23 8:28:49

 Media Media File
Video/Audio codec Note
Player Format Extention
MPEG-2 .vob Video) MPEG-2 Video
VOB Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer2
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
L-PCM
MOV .mov Video) H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
MPEG-4 part2
DivX Plus HD
MJPEG
Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer3
ADPCM
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
MPEG-4 HE-AAC
MP4 .mp4 Video) H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
.m4v Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer3
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
ASF .asf Video) MPEG-4 part2
.wmv VC-1 (WMV9)
.xvid Audio) ADPCM
WMA7/8/9 Std
DivX .divx Video) DivX Plus HD
Movie .div Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer3
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
MKV .mkv Video) MPEG-2 Video
.xdiv MPEG-4 part2
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
DivX Plus HD
Xvid
Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer2
MPEG-1/2 Layer3
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
RealMedia .rm Video) RealVideo 8, 9, 10
.rmvb Audio) RA-COOK
Flash .flv Video) Sorenson H.263 (FLV1)
Video H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
(FLV1) Audio) MPEG-1/2 Layer3
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
L-PCM
3GPP .3gp Video) MPEG-4 part2
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
Audio) MPEG-4 LC AAC

– 25 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 25 2013/05/23 8:28:49

 Media Media File
Video/Audio codec Note
Player Format Extention
MP3 .mp3 MPEG-1/2 Layer3 Maximum number of files: 4096 per
MP4 .mp4 MPEG-2/4 LC AAC folder
.m4a MPEG-4 HE-AAC
WMA .wma WMA7/8/9/ Std
Music
WAV .wav L-PCM
ADPCM
MKA .mka MPEG-1/2 Layer-2
MPEG-1/2 Layer-3

– 26 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 26 2013/05/23 8:28:50

 Troubleshooting Some pixels of the screen do not light up
• The LCD display panel is manufactured
Before calling a service technician, please check the using an extremely high level of precision
following table for a possible cause of the symptom technology, however, sometimes some pixels
and some solutions. of the screen may be missing picture elements
or have luminous spots. This is not a sign of a
Symptom and solution malfunction.
TV will not turn on The picture brightness varies when you display switch
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in, and the TV on.
then press 1. • If you switch the TV on at 0°C and under, wait
• The remote control batteries may be dead. until the warms up.
Replace the batteries.
Multiple images
No picture, no sound • The station may have broadcast difficulties.
• Check the aerial connections. Try another channel.
• Aerial reception may be poor. Use a high
No sound, picture OK
directional outdoor aerial.
• The sound may be muted. Press 2 +, − or
• Check if the direction of the aerial has
u.
changed.
• The station may have broadcast difficulties.
Try another channel. Poor colour or no colour
• The station may have broadcast difficulties.
Poor sound, picture OK
Try another channel.
• The station may have broadcast difficulties.
• Adjust the Tint and/or Colour in the PICTURE
Try another channel.
menu.
Poor picture, sound OK
• Check the aerial connections.
The remote control does not operate
• Remove all obstructions between the remote
• The station may have broadcast difficulties.
control and the remote control sensor on the
Try another channel.
TV.
• Adjust the PICTURE menu.
• The remote control batteries may be dead.
Poor reception of broadcast channels Replace the batteries.
• Check the aerial connections.
• The station may have broadcast difficulties.
Try another channel.
• Make sure the Colour System is properly set.
Teletext problems
• Check the aerial connections.
Good performance of text depends on a good
strong broadcast signal.
The brightness of the screen comes down, or flickers of
the screen are caused, or some parts of the screen do
not light up.
• When you just buy and start to use this TV, a
flickering may be caused in the screen. In this
case, switch off the TV, then switch on it again
to cure the condition.

– 27 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 27 2013/05/23 8:28:50

 Broadcast system Africa

Broadcast transmission systems of each country Country or region Colour Sound

or region Republic of South Africa, etc. PAL I

Asia M.E.
Note:
Country or region Colour Sound PAL, SECAM and NTSC 3.58 (MHz) are different colour
signal broadcast transmission systems applicable to
Bahrain, Kuwait, Israel, Oman, PAL B/G different countries or region. NTSC 4.43 (MHz) is used
Qatar, in special VCRs to playback NTSC recorded video tapes
United Arab Emirates, Yemen, through PAL TV equipment.
etc.
Indonesia, Malaysia,
Singapore, Thailand, etc.
China, Vietnam PAL D/K
China Hong Kong PAL I
Iraq, Islamic Republic of Iran, SECAM B/G
Lebanon, Saudi Arabia, etc.
Russian Federation, etc. SECAM D/K
Myanmar, Republic of the NTSC M
Philippines, etc.

– 28 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 28 2013/05/23 8:28:50

 Specifications COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT terminals (the signal
format)
LED TV 480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720p (50/60 Hz), 1080i
(50/60 Hz)
Model (These signal formats are converted to match
24P2305 Series, 32P2305 Series, 39P2305 Series the number of pixels of the LCD panel.)
Power source Colour System
110-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz PAL, SECAM, NTSC 3.58/4.43
Power consumption Aspect ratio
24” : 30 W, 0.4 W 16 : 9
32” : 55 W, 0.4 W Visible size (diagonal)
39” : 91 W, 0.4 W 24” : 59.8 cm
Dimensions 32” : 80.0 cm
24” : 552 (W) 430 (H) 135 (D) mm 39” : 97.9 cm
32” : 734 (W) 543 (H) 180 (D) mm Number of pixels
39” : 889 (W) 629 (H) 200 (D) mm 24”, 32” : 1366 (H) dots 5 768 (V) dots
Mass (Weight) 39” : 1920 (H) dots 5 1080 (V) dots
24” : 3.0 kg Audio power
32” : 5.0 kg 10 W + 10 W
39” : 7.0 kg
Speakers
TV system (Aerial input) 24” : Main 42 5 70 mm 2pcs.
Channel coverage: 32”, 39” : Main 40 5 120 mm 2pcs.
PAL B/G (CCIR) VHF 2 - 12
Input / Output terminals
UHF 21 - 69
CATV X - Z+2, S1 - S41 o (1) Input
PAL I (UK) VHF - COMPONENT/ Standard video V
UHF 21 - 69 VIDEO INPUT Component video Y, PB/CB, PR/CR
CATV - A/V Audio L / Mono, R
PAL D/K (CHINA) VHF 1 - 12 o (2) Input
UHF 13 - 57 Phono jacks A/V
CATV Z1 - Z38 O AUDIO Output Audio L / Mono, R
SECAM B/G (CCIR) VHF 2 - 12 (FIXED) Phono jacks
UHF 21 - 69 o RGB/PC Input
CATV X - Z+2, S1 - S41 Mini D-sub 15 pin Analogue RGB
SECAM D/K (OIRT) VHF 1 - 12 o PC/HDMI 1 Input
UHF 21 - 69 (AUDIO) 3.5 mm (Diameter) stereo
CATV X1 - X19
o HDMI 1-2 Input (type A)
NTSC M (US) VHF 2 - 13
19 pin A/V Digital
UHF 14 - 69
HDMI (Lip Sync)
A6 - A1, A - W, AA -
CATV USB port Media Player Interface version:
ZZ, AAA, BBB
NTSC M (JAPAN) VHF 1 - 12 USB 2.0
UHF 13 - 62 USB class: Mass Storage
CATV M1 - M10, S1 - S41 Support file system: FAT16 and FAT32

Special RF signal:
NTSC 4.43 colour system
5.5/6.0/6.5 MHz sound system
PAL 60 Hz colour system
5.5/6.0/6.5 MHz sound system

– 29 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 29 2013/05/23 8:28:50

 Operating condition • Design and specifications are subject to change
Temperature 0°C - 35°C without notice.
Humidity 20% - 80% (No moisture • Never service or remodel the TV by yourself. It
condensation) may expose you to a fire hazard or dangerous
Supplied accessories voltages.
24P2305 Series:
Owner’s manual (1), Remote control (1),
Batteries (2), Screw (1) (- page 3), Pedestal
stand (1), Screws (M5 5 2, M4 5 2) (stand type)
(- page 2)

32P2305 Series/39P2305 Series :

Owner’s manual (1), Remote control (1),
Batteries (2), Screw (1) (- page 3), Pedestal
stand (1), Screws (M5 5 2, M4 5 4) (stand type)
(- page 2)

– 30 –

243239P2305Series_EN.indd 30 2013/05/23 8:28:50

 Trademark Information
• HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United
States and other countries.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• DivX®, DivX Certified®, DivX Plus HD® and
associated logos are trademarks of Rovi
Corporation or its subsidiaries, and it is used
under license.
Covered by one or more of the following U.S.
patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER
TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE AVC STANDARD (AVC VIDEO) AND/OR (ii)
DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY
A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND
NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED
TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED
OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED
FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
• MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed
from Fraunhofer LLS and Thomson.
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER
TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE VC-1 STANDARD (VC-1 VIDEO) AND/OR (ii)
DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A
CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON
COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED
FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE
VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA,
L. L. C.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
– 31 –
243239P2305Series_EN.indd 31
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-
4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE
OF A CONSUMER FOR (i) ENCODING VIDEO
IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL
STANDARD (MPEG-4 VIDEO) AND/OR (ii)
DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED
BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL,
INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND
LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.
L. C.
SEE HTTP://WWW. MPEGLA. COM
• This product contains technology subject to
certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft.
Use or distribution of this technology outside of
this product is prohibited without the appropriate
license(s) from Microsoft.
• This product includes technology owned by
Microsoft Corporation and can not be used or
distributed without a license from Microsoft
Licensing, GP.
2013/05/23 8:28:50
243239P2305Series_EN.indd 32 2013/05/23 8:28:50
 24P2305
32P2305
39P2305
©2013 TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TD/TE VX1A00279600
 ‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻛﻠﺤﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﹰﺍ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ /32P2305‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪39P2305‬‬
‫× ‪M5‬‬

‫‪M4 × 4‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪24P2305‬‬

‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪M4 × 4‬‬

‫–‪–٢‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺣﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ‪Toshiba‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻛﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ LED‬ﻣﻦ ‪ .Toshiba‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ”ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ “LED‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫•‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺚ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪٢ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ‪٣ ......................................... Toshiba‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪٣ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪٦ ................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻛﺄﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ‪٦ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻬﺘﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﹰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺰﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪٧ .....................‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻧﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪٧ ...........................‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪٨ ............................................. DVI‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٨ ............................................................‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٩ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪٩ ............................................‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪١١ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١١ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻬﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪١٢ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺠﺮﻭﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪١٢ .................‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻒ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪١٣ ................................................................‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﻘﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﺴﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪١٣ .....................................PC/HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪١٣ ............................................HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﻛﻦ ﺣﺮﻳﺼﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻣﻨﻌﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٣ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪١٥ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪١٦ .................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪١٧ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ‪ ٢٤٠ - ١١٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪١٩ ................................................... PC‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪١٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪٢٤ ........................‬‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪٢٧ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪٢٨ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻌﺘﻤ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪ ASTA‬ﺃﻭ ‪ BSI‬ﻟـ ‪ .BS1362‬ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪٢٩ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﻣﺼﻨﹼﻒ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫–‪–٣‬‬
 ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻟﻬﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻭﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﺀﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻂ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ )ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻗﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻱ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻻ ﻳﹸﻔﺼﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫! ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺭﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٥‬ﻻ ﺗﺸﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﻋﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٦‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻪ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻔﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٧‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻋﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‪–٤‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻄﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻷﻱ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٥‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺪ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٦‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺴﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺷﺒﻴﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻐﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺠﺮﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺮﺵ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﺧﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﻀﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻼ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٧‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺨﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺬﻭﺏ ﻣﺘﺴﺒﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٨‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﻀﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻃﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٩‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١٠‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺷﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١١‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻗﺒﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺨﺪﺷﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻂ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٤‬ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ … ﺍﻟﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ AM‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٥‬ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٦‬ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺎﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Toshiba‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺍﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻻﺯﻝ‪…،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Toshiba‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺭﺋﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺴﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪… ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Toshiba‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Toshiba‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‪–٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻠﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻠﻴﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺳﻘﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺴﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﺭ ﻭﺃﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٤‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻬﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻌﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﻌﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺼﺪﻉ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ )ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ )ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ( ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺳﻄﺤﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻘﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺗﺴﺦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻈﻔﻪ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻝ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺼﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻨﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﻤﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺋﻰ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ‪ Toshiba‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪IN‬‬

‫‪OUT‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬

‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻓﹸﻚ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ (AAA) R03‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻗﻄﺒﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ –‪ +/‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ –‪ +/‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫! )ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( — ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫‪) USB‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ( — ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪) USB‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫! )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( — ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪) 2 – +‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( — ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪) u U‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ( — ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﹸﻤﻨﻊ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻌﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﹰﺎ ﺧﻠﻂ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) p / o‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( — ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫–‪–٦‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪١١‬‬ ‫‪) o HDMI 2‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ( — ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪(0-9‬‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪. HDMI‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ )ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )‪.(Z‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )‪.(z‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪٢٤‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

‫‪ ١‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ — ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬

‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ — ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ — ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪PC/HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )‪(v ،W‬‬
‫)‪(AUDIO‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ — ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬

‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪L/‬‬
‫‪MONO‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪RGB/PC‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )‪(cc ،CC‬‬
‫‪L/‬‬
‫‪MONO‬‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪ — OK‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )‪(c‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT/‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ — ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫)‪VIDEO INPUT AUDIO(FIXED‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬

‫‪ ٧‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬

‫‪OUT‬‬

‫‪ ٨‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ‪ TEXT‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬

‫–‪–٧‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪DVI‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.DVI‬‬
‫ﺻﻤﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ HDCP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪) CEA-861-D‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻊ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪.(DVI‬‬
‫ﺻﻤﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪) 1080i‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻭ‪) 1080p‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ 480i‬ﻭ‪480p‬‬ ‫‪ ٦٠/٥٠/٢٤‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﹰ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 576i‬ﻭ‪ 576p‬ﻭ‪) 720p‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪) VGA‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ VESA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٧٥/٧٢/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫• ‪ :HDCP‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻰ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ CEA-861-D‬ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﻧﺎﺷﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪ VESA :S-VGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٧٢/٦٠/٥٦‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ‪ VESA :XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٧٠/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ‪ VESA :W-XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ‪ VESA :W-XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ × ١٣٦٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ‪ VESA :S-XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﺎ ﹰ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S-XGA‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ؛‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﻭﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) o HDMI 1‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ( — ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻰ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪) DVI‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVI‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) (AUDIO) o PC/HDMI 1‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ( — ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺛﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ )ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،DVI‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) A‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ( — ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) o (1) COMPONENT / VIDEO INPUT‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ( —‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺮﻛﺐ(‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• )‪) o (2‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ — (٢‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) o RGB/PC‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ( — ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ )‪) (PC‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) O AUDIO‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ( — ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻔﺊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻜ ﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ‪o COMPONENT / VIDEO INPUT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬ ‫‪PB/CB‬‬

‫• ‪ :L-PCM‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪PR/CR‬‬ ‫‪PR/CR‬‬

‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ‪ ،L-PCM :‬ﻭ ‪ ،Dolby Digital‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫‪L/‬‬

‫‪MONO‬‬
‫‪L/‬‬
‫‪MONO‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪ ٤٨/٤٤٫١/٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT/‬‬ ‫‪COMPONENT/‬‬
‫‪VIDEO INPUT‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO INPUT‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ VESA :VGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٧٢/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪DVI‬‬
‫‪ VESA :S-VGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٧٢/٦٠/٥٦‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ VESA :XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٧٠/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.DVI‬‬
‫‪ VESA :W-XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠ :W-XGA‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٧٥/٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ VESA :W-XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ × ١٣٦٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVI‬ﺃﻭﻻﹰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٩٠٠ × ١٤٤٠ :W-XGA+‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ VESA :S-XGA‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﹸﻀﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ p١٠٨٠ × ١٩٢٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ٦٧٫٥ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ‪ L-PCM‬ﻭ ‪Dolby‬‬ ‫•‬
‫)‪ ،(H‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ١٤٨٫٥ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫‪ Digital‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٤٨/٤٤٫١/٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ HDMI 1‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫–‪–٨‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ ! ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺎﺯﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ ﹰﺀ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٧‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ‬‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻚ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻴﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺐ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻏﻴﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﻴﻰﺀ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ D-sub‬ﻣﺼﻐﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪ ١٥‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪.DOS/V‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺩﻟﻴﻼ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.PC‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD-Video‬ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪ ١٥‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪D-sub‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻭﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٧‬‬
‫‪NC‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪NC‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫‪DDC Data‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ( ‪12‬‬
‫ﱠ‬ ‫‪) NC‬ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪) H-sync‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ(‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪NC‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪) V-sync‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪DDC Clock‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ! ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ! ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ !‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ AutoView‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ”‪) “A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫)ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪،١٠‬‬
‫‪.(٢٨‬‬

‫–‪–٩‬‬
 ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪AutoView‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٨‬‬ ‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٤‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪AutoView‬‬
‫‪ : A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ(‪،PAL : P ،‬‬
‫‪ NTSC : N4 ،SECAM : S‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) ٤٫٤٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ NTSC : N3‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) ٣٫٥٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﹼ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ )‪ ،(A‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻧ ﹰﺎ ﻭ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﺧﺮ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٨‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ”‪ “8‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ”(“‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ﹴﺬ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ PU‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Pu‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ”‪“8‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ E‬ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﹸ‬
‫‪ G‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﺑ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ H‬ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ I‬ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪/‬ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬

‫‪ J‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 B/G A‬‬ ‫‪C 1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬

‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬

‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬

‫– ‪– ١٠‬‬
 ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ (١‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ”‪ ) “ M‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٨‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺳﻴ ﹰﺌﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ QUICK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪0‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪00:00‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪00:00‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٤‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٩‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٦‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٦‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.٢٣ ،٢٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٠‬‬ ‫‪Device Information‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺇﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪SETUP‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬ ‫‪English‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Auto Tuning‬‬
‫‪Manual Tuning‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Colour System‬‬ ‫‪Auto‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Quick Setup‬‬
‫‪Location‬‬ ‫‪Home‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ EXIT‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ RETURN‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫– ‪– ١١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ ،“4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ،MNOP‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ ،“1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ o‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪o‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ o / p‬ﻭ‪U‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ u‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓﹰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪) TV‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ o (1)) VIDEO1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ COMPONENT/VIDEO INPUT‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ o (2)) VIDEO2‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) HDMI 1‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ (HDMI 1‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) HDMI 2‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ (HDMI 2‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،o RGB/PC) PC‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،١٠‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪.١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ PU‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Pu‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ /‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪.(0-9‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪) ABCD‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ (١‬ﺑﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪MNOP‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪:(٤‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،--‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،PC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﺎﻻﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪،VCR‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ،ABCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬

‫– ‪– ١٢‬‬
 ‫‪4:3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺚ ‪ 4:3‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 4:3‬ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﹰ ﻴﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ RGB/PC‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ RGB/PC‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ”ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ“ ﻫﻮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﹰﺀ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻭ ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ )ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ‪.(VGA‬‬
‫– ‪– ١٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.LIST‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪PC/HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪ ،PC‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻭﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪PC/HDMI 1‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪ PC :‬ﻭ‪HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVI‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ HDMI 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭﺃﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻭﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪) 16:9‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪ 16:9‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 14:9‬ﺃﻭ ‪20:9‬‬
‫…ﺍﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Eco‬ﺳﻴﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪.Eco‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ PC‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ RGB/PC‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ (NTSC) ٣٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (PAL) ٢٥‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ 480i‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 576i‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.1080i‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪(OK‬‬
‫– ‪– ١٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 21:9‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺜﹰﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،RGB/PC‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻟﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AutoView‬ﻭﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ‪ Eco‬ﻭﻛﺮﻳﻜﺖ‪/‬ﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻭﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭ ‪ PC‬ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
 ‫ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪ 1-‬ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪2-‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻭﺭﻙ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪ 1-‬ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،2-‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ MTS‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﹰ ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ d‬ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.s‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ j‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.s‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺚ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ‪I‬‬ ‫‪ j‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪1-‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ‪II‬‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪2-‬‬
‫—‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪ e‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺿﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻤﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ e‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ 2-‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ e‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.s‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ 1-‬ﻭﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪2-‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺚ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ e‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.2-‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﹼﻳﻦ‪  :‬ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬
‫– ‪– ١٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪(OK‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )‪(NR‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ MPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻌﻮﺿﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ( ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻩ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ Auto Clean :‬ﻭ‪ MPEG‬ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ :‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻣﺨﻀﺮ ﹼ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) 3D‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) 3D‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) MTS‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ MTS‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻷﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ MTS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪MTS :‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ MTS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ e‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻣﻔﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺧﺎﺻ ﹰﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،OK :‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪  ،(0-9‬ﻭ ‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﹰ ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫– ‪– ١٦‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﹼﻳﻦ‪  :‬ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪(OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪.Dolby Digital‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ“‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ ‪ ATV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﹼﻳﻦ‪  :‬ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪OK :‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪(OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻧﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ٤-١‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﻣﻨﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﺸﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﻣﻨﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺒﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺒﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻴﺔ )ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ PAL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SECAM‬ﺃﻭ ‪NTSC 4.43‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫– ‪– ١٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ )ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺑﺪﺧﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ‪4:3‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،4:3‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ 4:3‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ‪4:3‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪OK :‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫)ﻣﺮﻛ ﱠﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪NTSC 3.58‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻣﻊ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺳﺘﻜﺴﺖ ‪ FASTEXT‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻯ ‪ ٤‬ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻯ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺳﺘﻜﺴﺖ ‪ FASTEXT‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ )ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ( ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Toshiba‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TEXT‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪TEXT M00‬‬ ‫‪14:58:55‬‬
‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪101‬‬ ‫‪102‬‬ ‫‪103‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻫﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪100‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ 101‬ﻭ‪ 102‬ﻭ‪ ،103‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠١‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﹰ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﻮﻧ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﹰ ﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،OK‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TEXT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺚ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫– ‪– ١٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪TEXT‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TEXT‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺚ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TEXT‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻘﺮﺍﺋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﹰ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺑﺒﺜﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻴﻜﺴﺖ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻭﺿﻌﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪FASTEXT‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،PU‬ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .Pu‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TEXT‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪Sport‬‬ ‫‪14:57:55‬‬
‫‪Football‬‬ ‫‪Baseball‬‬ ‫‪Racing‬‬ ‫‪Swimming‬‬
 ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪PC‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ”ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ“‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﹼﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪PC‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪PC‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ PC‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪PC‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪(OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪ PC‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪USB2.0 HS :‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻓﺌﺔ )‪Mass Storage Class (MSC‬‬
‫– ‪– ١٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻜﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺜﻪ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TEXT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﺃﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ‪ TEXT‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫‪21:56:25‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪PC‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ o‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ ) PC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.USB HDD‬‬
‫• ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.RETURN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ FAT16 :‬ﻭ ‪FAT32‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ QUICK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺫﻱ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Device Information‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ TOSHIBA .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﻨﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺫﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.EXIT‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Media Player‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﹸ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺜﺒ ﹰﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﹼﺮﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪/C:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪XXXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬

‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.jpg‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ًّ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪  ، ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ Pu / PU‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ RETURN‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬

‫– ‪– ٢٠‬‬
 ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪،‬‬
‫‪Movie‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪/C:‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪XXXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mpg‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬

‫‪XXXXXXXX.mpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mpg‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mpg‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Pu / PU‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ RETURN‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ v‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ QUICK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،v‬ﻓﺴﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ W‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ cc‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CC‬ﺃﻭ ‪.cc‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪x8 s x4 s x2 s x1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮﻩ ﻧﻘﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ )ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪x1 s x2 s x4 s x8‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮﻩ ﻧﻘﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ :RETURN‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ :  ‬ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.EXIT‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٤‬‬

‫– ‪– ٢١‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﹰ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،DivX® VOD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،DivX VOD Registration‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫®‬
‫‪٣‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (cc / CC‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ DivX® VOD‬ﻭﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺐ ®‪ DivX‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.http://vod.divx.com‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ s‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،DivX® VOD Deregistration‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ QUICK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ DivX® VOD‬ﻭﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ®‪ DivX‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.http://vod.divx.com‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX® :DIVX‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ LLC ،DivX‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪.Rovi Corporation‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ®‪ DivX Certified‬ﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪ divx.com‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.RETURN‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪.DivX‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DivX VOD‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ®‪DivX Certified‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ DivX VOD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﺍﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ v‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ DivX VOD‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪ vod.divx.com‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ »ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ«‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ®‪ DivX Certified‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ®‪ DivX‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (H.264/MKV) DivX Plus® HD‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ،1080p‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ‪ DivX Plus‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ cc‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CC‬ﺃﻭ ‪.cc‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.EXIT‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ ٪ ١٠‬ﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﻓﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ®‪:DivX‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮﻩ ﻧﻘﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﺍﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺟﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ )‪ (VOD‬ﻣﻦ ®‪ .DivX‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫®‬
‫ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ DivX VOD‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﹸ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮﻩ ﻧﻘﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬

‫– ‪– ٢٢‬‬
 ‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ v‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﹰﺓ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﹰﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺛ ﱠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪/ Z‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛ ﱠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ W‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺄﺟﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Z‬ﺃﻭ ‪z‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) c‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ cc‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (cc / CC‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CC‬ﺃﻭ ‪.cc‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ‪ DivX Plus‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX Plus‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ QUICK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺭﺍ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.RETURN‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪//MP3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪XXXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mp3‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mp3‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mp3‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mp3‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﹰ‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mp3‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mp3‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mp3‬‬ ‫‪XXXXXXXX.mp3‬‬

‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.EXIT‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Pu / PU‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ RETURN‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﺃﻭ ‪) c‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫– ‪– ٢٣‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪JPEG Exif ver 2.1 :‬‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫‪.jpg‬‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ٤٠٩٦ :‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪.jpeg‬‬

‫*( ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪PNG‬‬ ‫‪.png‬‬ ‫‪PNG‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫‪BMP‬‬ ‫‪.bmp‬‬ ‫‪BMP‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ٤٠٩٦ :‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪MPEG-2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪.avi‬‬ ‫‪AVI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC‬‬
‫‪١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬‬ ‫‪DivX Plus HD‬‬
‫‪Xvid‬‬
‫*( ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MJPEG‬‬
‫)‪Sorenson H.263 (FLV1‬‬
‫)‪VC-1 (WMV9‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-1/2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ(‬
‫‪ MPEG-1/2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪٣‬‬
‫)‪Dolby Digital (AC-3‬‬
‫‪L-PCM‬‬
‫‪ADPCM‬‬
‫‪MPEG-2/4 LC AAC‬‬
‫‪MPEG-4 HE-AAC‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪WMA7/8/9 Std‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-1‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪.mpg‬‬ ‫‪MPEG-2‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-2‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.mpeg‬‬ ‫‪PS‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-1/2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ(‬ ‫‪.dat‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-1/2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪٣‬‬
‫)‪Dolby Digital (AC-3‬‬
‫‪L-PCM‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-2‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪.ts‬‬ ‫‪MPEG-2‬‬
‫)‪H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC‬‬ ‫‪.trp‬‬ ‫‪TS‬‬
‫)‪VC-1 (WMV9‬‬ ‫‪.tp‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-1/2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ(‬ ‫‪.m2ts‬‬
‫)‪Dolby Digital (AC-3‬‬
‫‪L-PCM‬‬

‫– ‪– ٢٤‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬/‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬MPEG-2 (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .vob MPEG-2
٢ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ VOB
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
L-PCM
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .mov MOV
٢ ‫ ﺟﺰﺀ‬MPEG-4
DivX Plus HD
MJPEG
٣ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
ADPCM
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
MPEG-4 HE-AAC
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .mp4 MP4
٣ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ .m4v
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
٢ ‫ ﺟﺰﺀ‬MPEG-4 (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .asf ASF
VC-1 (WMV9) .wmv
ADPCM (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ .xvid
WMA7/8/9 Std
DivX Plus HD (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .divx DivX
٣ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ .div ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
‫ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬MPEG-2 (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .mkv MKV
٢ ‫ ﺟﺰﺀ‬MPEG-4 .xdiv
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
DivX Plus HD
Xvid
٢ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
٣ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
RealVideo 8, 9, 10 (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .rm RealMedia
RA-COOK (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ .rmvb
Sorenson H.263 (FLV1) (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .flv Flash
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) Video
٣ ‫ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬MPEG-1/2 (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ (FLV1)
MPEG-2/4 LC AAC
L-PCM
٢ ‫ ﺟﺰﺀ‬MPEG-4 (‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .3gp 3GPP
H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
MPEG-4 LC AAC (‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬

– ٢٥ –
 ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ٤٠٩٦ :‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪ MPEG-1/2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪٣‬‬ ‫‪.mp3‬‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪MPEG-2/4 LC AAC‬‬ ‫‪.mp4‬‬ ‫‪MP4‬‬
‫‪MPEG-4 HE-AAC‬‬ ‫‪.m4a‬‬
‫‪WMA7/8/9/ Std‬‬ ‫‪.wma‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪WMA‬‬
‫‪L-PCM‬‬ ‫‪.wav‬‬ ‫‪WAV‬‬
‫‪ADPCM‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-1/2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪٢‬‬ ‫‪.mka‬‬ ‫‪MKA‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-1/2‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪٣‬‬

‫– ‪– ٢٦‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻂ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺐ ﺑﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻻﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺭﺩﻱﺀ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪2 +‬‬ ‫•‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ −‬ﺃﻭ ‪.u‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺐ ﺑﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺐ ﺑﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺭﺩﻱﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺐ ﺑﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﺃﺯﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺐ ﺑﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﺩﻱﺀ ﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺐ ﺑﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺚ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫– ‪– ٢٧‬‬
 ‫ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﺚ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ PAL‬ﻭ‪ SECAM‬ﻭ‪ NTSC‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) ٣٫٥٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪B/G‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺮﺍﺋﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ NTSC‬ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) ٤٫٤٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻦ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪.PAL‬‬
‫‪ NTSC‬ﻣﺴ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪D/K‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻨﺎﻡ‬
‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮﻧﻎ ﻛﻮﻧﻎ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‬
‫‪B/G SECAM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬
‫‪D/K SECAM‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬
‫‪M NTSC‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻨﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﻴﻦ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬

‫– ‪– ٢٨‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ‪) COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪ ٦٠/٥٠) 720p ،576p ،576i ،480p ،480i‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪1080i ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪LED‬‬
‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫‪(.LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ ،24P2305‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ ،32P2305‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪39P2305‬‬
‫‪NTSC 3.58/4.43 ،SECAM ،PAL‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠-١١٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪16 : 9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٣٠ :‬ﻭﺍﺕ‪ ٠٫٤ ،‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ )ﻗﻄﺮﻱ(‬ ‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٥٥ :‬ﻭﺍﺕ‪ ٠٫٤ ،‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٥٩٫٨ :‬ﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ ٣٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٩١ :‬ﻭﺍﺕ‪ ٠٫٤ ،‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٨٠٫٠ :‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٩٧٫٩ :‬ﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪) ٥٥٢ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ‪) ٤٣٠‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ١٣٥‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ٣٢ ،‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ١٣٦٦ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪) ٧٣٤ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ‪) ٥٤٣‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ١٨٠‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ ٧٦٨‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ١٩٢٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ ٣٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪) ٨٨٩ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ‪) ٦٢٩‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٢٠٠‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ ١٠٨٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ(‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ١٠ +‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٣٫٠ :‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٥٫٠ :‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ٧٠ × ٤٢‬ﻣﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٧٫٠ :‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ٣٩ ،‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ١٢٠ × ٤٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ )ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻓﺎ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪2 - 12‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫‪(CCIR) B/G‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫)‪o (1‬‬ ‫‪21 - 69‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬
‫‪V‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪/COMPONENT‬‬ ‫‪S1 - S41 ،X - Z+2‬‬ ‫‪CATV‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫)‪(UK‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪PR/CR ،PB/CB ،Y‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪VIDEO INPUT‬‬ ‫‪21 - 69‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬
‫‪Mono ،R / Audio L‬‬ ‫‪A/V‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪CATV‬‬
‫‪1 - 12‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫‪(CHINA) D/K‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫)‪o (2‬‬ ‫‪13 - 57‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬
‫‪Z1 - Z38‬‬ ‫‪CATV‬‬
‫‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪2 - 12‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫‪(CCIR) B/G‬‬ ‫‪SECAM‬‬
‫‪Mono ،R / Audio L‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ‬ ‫‪O AUDIO‬‬ ‫‪21 - 69‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫)‪(FIXED‬‬ ‫‪S1 - S41 ،X - Z+2‬‬ ‫‪CATV‬‬
‫‪1 - 12‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫‪(OIRT) D/K‬‬ ‫‪SECAM‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪o RGB/PC‬‬ ‫‪21 - 69‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬
‫‪Mini D-sub 15 pin Analogue RGB‬‬ ‫‪X1 - X19‬‬ ‫‪CATV‬‬
‫‪2 - 13‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫)‪(US‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪NTSC‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪o PC/HDMI 1‬‬ ‫‪14 - 69‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫)‪(AUDIO‬‬ ‫‪،A - W ،A6 - A1‬‬
‫‪CATV‬‬
‫‪BBB ،AAA ،AA - ZZ‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ )ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(A‬‬ ‫‪o HDMI 1-2‬‬ ‫‪1 - 12‬‬ ‫‪VHF‬‬ ‫)‪(JAPAN‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪NTSC‬‬
‫‪ A/V‬ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ ١٩‬ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪13 - 62‬‬ ‫‪UHF‬‬
‫‪S1 - S41 ،M1 - M10‬‬ ‫‪CATV‬‬
‫)‪HDMI (Lip Sync‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ RF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪USB 2.0 :‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪NTSC 4.43‬‬
‫ﻓﺌﺔ ‪Mass Storage :USB‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ٦٫٥/٦٫٠/٥٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻢ‪ FAT16 :‬ﻭ ‪FAT32‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪PAL 60‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ٦٫٥/٦٫٠/٥٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬

‫– ‪– ٢٩‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿ ﹰﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻻﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺮ ‪ ٣٥ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪) ٪٨٠ - ٪٢٠‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪:24P2305‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ )‪ ،(١‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ ،(١‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )‪،(٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ )‪ ) (١‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٣‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ )‪ ،(١‬ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ‬
‫)‪) (M٤ × ٢ ،M٥ × ٢‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ( ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢‬‬

‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪/32P2305‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪:39P2305‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ )‪ ،(١‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ ،(١‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )‪،(٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ )‪ ) (١‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٣‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ )‪ ،(١‬ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ‬
‫)‪) (M٤ × ٤ ،M٥ × ٢‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ( ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢‬‬

‫– ‪– ٣٠‬‬
 ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ MPEG-4 VISUAL‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ )‪ (١‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)‪ MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD (MPEG-4 VIDEO‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ Licensing LLC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ .Dolby‬ﺇﻥ ‪Dolby‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺑﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪.Dolby‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ MPEG-4 VIDEO‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫®‪ DivX‬ﻭ®‪ DivX Certified‬ﻭ®‪ DivX Plus HD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ .MPEG LA‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺘﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Rovi Corporation‬‬
‫ﻷﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.MPEG LA، L. L. C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪7،295،673 :‬؛ ‪7،460،668‬؛ ‪7،515،710‬؛ ‪7،519،274‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪AVC‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪• This product contains technology subject to certain‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ )‪(١‬‬
‫‪intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ ) AVC‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ (AVC‬ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ )‪(٢‬‬
‫‪distribution of this technology outside of this product‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ AVC‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬
‫‪is prohibited without the appropriate license(s) from‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪Microsoft.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .AVC‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺘﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪• This product includes technology owned by Microsoft‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫‪Corporation and can not be used or distributed without‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪a license from Microsoft Licensing، GP.‬‬ ‫‪.MPEG LA، L.L.C‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ ،MPEG Layer-3‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻲ ‪ ،Fraunhofer LLS‬ﻭ ‪.Thomson‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪VC-1‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪) VC-1‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ (VC-1‬ﻭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ )‪ (٢‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VC-1‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .VC-1‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺘﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.MPEG LA، L. L. C‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬

‫– ‪– ٣١‬‬
– ٣٢ –